blob: bef8601313c2c8d9a7491f47c3ddf1cce70a12e5 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.2. Last change: 2021 Mar 06
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar8024f932020-01-14 19:29:13 +010063are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar4072ba52020-12-23 13:56:35 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep most of your current color settings.
70This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010082NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000083The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010084file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000085automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +0100220To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN
927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100969(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100971 :let c_no_bracket_error = 0
972To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000973 :unlet c_comment_strings
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100974Setting the value to zero doesn't work!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000975
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100976An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
977 :set filetype=cpp
978
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000979Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200980*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
981*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
982*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
984*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
985*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
986*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000987 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200988 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
989 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100990*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this
991 forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200992*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
993*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
994*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
995*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
996*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200997 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200998*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
999*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
1000*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
1001*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1002*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001003
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001004When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1005become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1006 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001007"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1008 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001009
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1011when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1012to a larger number: >
1013 :let c_minlines = 100
1014This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1015displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1016disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1017
1018When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1019works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1020you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1021
1022To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1023Example: >
1024 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1025 :function MyCadd()
1026 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1027 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1028 : hi link cMyItem Title
1029 :endfun
1030
1031ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1032"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1033not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1034highlighting: >
1035 :hi link cConstant NONE
1036
1037If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1038highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1039
1040If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001041in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001042~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001043 syn sync fromstart
1044 set foldmethod=syntax
1045
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001046CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001047
1048C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1049the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1050
1051By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1052of C or C++: >
1053 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1054
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001056CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001057
1058Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1059that are available. Additionally there is:
1060
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001061chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1062chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1063chill_minlines like c_minlines
1064
1065
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001066CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001067
1068ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1069If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1070 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1071This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1072"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1073file).
1074
1075You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1077Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1078 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1079This works immediately.
1080
1081
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001082CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1083
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001084The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1085*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1086value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1087identifiers:
1088>
1089 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1090 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1091 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1092 \ }
1093<
1094Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1095
1096If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1097language constants and special forms are matched.
1098
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001099Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1100Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1101using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1102
1103Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1104bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1105
1106This option is off by default.
1107>
1108 " Default
1109 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1110<
1111
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001112COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001113
1114COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1115development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1116versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1117add this line to your .vimrc: >
1118 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1119To disable it again, use this: >
1120 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1121
1122
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001123COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001124
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001125The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001126comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1127
1128 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1129
1130The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1131
1132
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001133CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1134
1135Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
1136
1137Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001138cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001139cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001140
1141
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001142CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001143
1144This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1145used.
1146
1147Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1148symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1149between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001150"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1151>
1152 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001153
1154For using tcsh: >
1155
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001156 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001157
1158Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1159tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001160will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001161"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1162variable.
1163
1164
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001165CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001166
1167Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001168hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001169or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001170normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001171line to your .vimrc file: >
1172
1173 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1174
1175Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1176
1177 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1178
1179To disable these again, use this: >
1180
1181 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1182 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1183<
1184
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001185CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001186
1187Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1188doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1189startup vimrc: >
1190 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1191
1192
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001193DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1194
1195Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1196used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1197a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1198from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1199
1200More information about the language and its development environment at the
1201official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1202
1203dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1204type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1205and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1206framework.
1207
1208Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1209
1210https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1211
1212
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001213DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001214
1215Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001216according to freedesktop.org standard:
Bram Moolenaar65e0d772020-06-14 17:29:55 +02001217https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
1218To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set >
1219 let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1
1220Note that this may cause wrong highlight.
1221To highlight KDE-reserved features, set >
1222 let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1
1223g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001224
1225
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001226DIFF *diff.vim*
1227
1228The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1229there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1230
1231 :let diff_translations = 0
1232
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001233Also see |diff-slow|.
1234
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001235
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001236DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001237
1238The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1239provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1240the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1241versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1242uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1243line to your startup file: >
1244 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1245
1246
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001247DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001248DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1249DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001250
1251There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1252are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1253automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1254defaults to XML.
1255You can set the type manually: >
1256 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1257or: >
1258 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1259You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1260Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1261 :set filetype=docbksgml
1262or: >
1263 :set filetype=docbkxml
1264
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001265You can specify the DocBook version: >
1266 :let docbk_ver = 3
1267When not set 4 is used.
1268
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001269
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001270DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001271
1272There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1273extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1274is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1275this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1276Select the version you want with the following line: >
1277
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001278 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001279
1280If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1281Windows 2000.
1282
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001283A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001284"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1285is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001286
1287 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1288
1289If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1290
1291
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001292DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1293
1294Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001295(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1296idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001297
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001298There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1299explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1300Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001301 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1302or >
1303 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1304
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001305It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1306the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1307adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001308 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1309
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001310There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001311are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1312
1313Variable Default Effect ~
1314g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1315g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1316 doxygen comments.
1317
1318doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1319 and html_my_rendering underline.
1320
1321doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1322 colour highlighting.
1323
1324doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001325 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001326
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001327There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001328configuration.
1329
1330Highlight Effect ~
1331doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1332 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1333doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1334 \endlink from a \link section.
1335
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001336
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001337DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001338
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001339The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001340case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1341
1342 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1343
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001344The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001345this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1346
1347 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1348
1349before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1350Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1351'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1352Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1353highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001354delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001355
1356 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1357
1358The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1359
1360
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001361EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001362
1363While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001364syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1365highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001366highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1367
1368 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1369
1370Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1371
1372Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1373
1374 :let eiffel_strict=1
1375 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1376
1377Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1378five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1379"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1380
1381Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1382guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1383lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1384
1385If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1386"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1387
1388 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1389
1390instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1391
1392Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1393experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1394
1395 :let eiffel_ise=1
1396
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001397Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001398
1399 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1400
1401to your startup file.
1402
1403
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001404EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1405
Bram Moolenaar7ff78462020-07-10 22:00:53 +02001406Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001407version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001408Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1409
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001410Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1411for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001412(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1413
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001414The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1415
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001416 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1417 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1418
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001419To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001420auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1421add the following line to your startup file: >
1422
1423 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"
1424
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001425 or
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001426
1427 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"
1428
1429
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001430ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001431
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001432Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001433the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001434
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001435The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1436put the following line in your vimrc: >
1437
1438 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1439
1440To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1441
1442 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001443
1444
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001445FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1446
1447FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001448NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1449development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001450
1451Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1452syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1453editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1454start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1455'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1456(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1457and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1458
1459If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1460move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1461 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1462
1463
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001464FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001465
1466The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1467modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001468following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001469J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1470
1471If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1472redefine the following syntax groups:
1473
1474 - formConditional
1475 - formNumber
1476 - formStatement
1477 - formHeaderStatement
1478 - formComment
1479 - formPreProc
1480 - formDirective
1481 - formType
1482 - formString
1483
1484Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1485directives per default in the same syntax group.
1486
1487A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001488header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001489this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1490
1491 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1492
1493The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001494gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001495conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1496
1497
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001498FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001499
1500Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001501Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001502should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1503almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001504
1505Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001506Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001507syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1508
1509When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001510form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001511 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001512in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001513form, then >
1514 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1515in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1516
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001517If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1518extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1519file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1520will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1521on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001522
1523When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1524source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001525fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001526neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001527determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1528using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1529compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1530free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1531columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1532are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1533algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1534file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1535incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1536just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001537of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001538
1539Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001540Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001541fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001542Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1543using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001544variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1545 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001546placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001547mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1548
1549Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1550If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1551fortran_fold with a command such as >
1552 :let fortran_fold=1
1553to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1554is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001555subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001556also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1557 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1558then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001559case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001560fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1561 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1562then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001563lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001564
1565If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1566fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001567you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001568units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1569unit.
1570
1571More precise fortran syntax ~
1572If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1573 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001574then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001575statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1576recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1577construct.
1578
1579Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001580The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1581find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1582deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1583items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001584
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001585If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1586other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001587that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001588
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001589The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1590the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1591to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1592fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1593ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001594
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001595If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1596set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1597ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1598an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1599contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001600 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1601 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001602 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001603 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001604 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001605 endif
1606Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1607precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1608
1609Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001610the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1611by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1612f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1613files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1614identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1615Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001616 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001617
1618For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1619now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1620silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001621instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001622
1623The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1624comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1625non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1626or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001627items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001628
1629Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001630Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1631strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001632because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1633
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001634For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1635|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001636
1637
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001638FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001639
1640In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1641the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1642appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1643patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1644number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1645
1646For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1647as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1648
1649 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1650 \ set filetype=fvwm
1651
1652If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1653find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1654"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1655in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1656
1657 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1658
1659to your .vimrc file.
1660
1661
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001662GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001663
1664The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1665the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1666is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1667are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1668
1669 htmlString
1670 htmlValue
1671 htmlEndTag
1672 htmlTag
1673 htmlTagN
1674
1675Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1676java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1677group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1678correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1679to the contains clause.
1680
1681The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1682group to make them easier to see.
1683
1684
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001685GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001686
1687The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001688under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001689of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1690filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1691(see |filetype.txt|).
1692
1693
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001694HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001695
1696The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001697Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001698syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1699
1700If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1701light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1702 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1703To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1704add: >
1705 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1706To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1707 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1708And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1709 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1710If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1711your .vimrc: >
1712 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1713
1714The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1715directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001716directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1717operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001718as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1719 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1720
1721The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1722automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1723TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001724or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001725in your .vimrc >
1726 :let lhs_markup = none
1727for no highlighting at all, or >
1728 :let lhs_markup = tex
1729to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1730For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1731this variable, so e.g. >
1732 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001733will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001734set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1735loading a file.
1736
1737
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001738HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001739
1740The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1741
1742The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1743This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01001744closing tags the 'Identifier' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those
1745are defined for you)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001746
1747Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1748names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1749makes it easy to spot errors
1750
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001751Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001752names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1753
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001754Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001755are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1756text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1757while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001758only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001759<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001760
1761If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1762following syntax groups:
1763
1764 - htmlBold
1765 - htmlBoldUnderline
1766 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1767 - htmlUnderline
1768 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1769 - htmlItalic
1770 - htmlTitle for titles
1771 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1772
1773To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1774of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1775following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1776are read during initialization) >
1777 :let html_my_rendering=1
1778
1779If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1780http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1781
1782You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1783vimrc file: >
1784 :let html_no_rendering=1
1785
1786HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1787details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1788However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001789ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001790 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1791
1792JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1793'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001794programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001795supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1796
1797Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1798
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001799There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1800written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001801following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1802(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001803>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001804 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1805 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1806
1807Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1808the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1809
1810
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001811HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001812
1813The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1814
1815Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1816doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1817this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1818different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1819 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1820
1821Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1822
1823Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1824signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1825a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1826 :set syntax=htmlos
1827
1828Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1829block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1830
1831
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001832IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001833
1834Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1835how to recognize this filetype.
1836
1837To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1838 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1839
1840
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001841INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001842
1843Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1844most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1845to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1846 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1847
1848By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1849and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1850you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1851need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1852 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1853
1854This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1855set of highlighted system functions.
1856
1857The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1858it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1859by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1860startup sequence: >
1861 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1862
1863By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1864version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1865Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1866startup sequence: >
1867 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1868
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001869IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1870
1871IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1872Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1873
1874IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1875rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001876repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001877
1878There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1879are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1880
1881The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1882
1883Variable Effect ~
1884
1885idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1886 extensions
1887idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1888idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1889 quite helpful)
1890idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1891
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001892
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001893JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001894
1895The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1896
1897In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1898flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001899classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001900way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1901 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1902
1903All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1904highlight them use: >
1905 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1906
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001907You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001908download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1909If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1910use the following: >
1911 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1912Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1913
1914Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001915how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001916functions:
1917
1918If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1919a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1920 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1921However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1922supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1923 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1924If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1925declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1926definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1927original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1928
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001929In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001930only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001931statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001932your startup file: >
1933 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1934The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001935characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001936new highlightings for the following groups.:
1937 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1938which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001939strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar2547aa92020-07-26 17:00:44 +02001940have opted to choose another background for those statements.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001941
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001942Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1943creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1944similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1945and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001946 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1947 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1948 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1949 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1950 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001951 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001952 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1953To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1954 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1955
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001956If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1957can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1958scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1959actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1960CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001961 :let java_javascript=1
1962 :let java_css=1
1963 :let java_vb=1
1964
1965In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1966for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1967 :hi link javaParen Comment
1968or >
1969 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1970
1971If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1972when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1973to a larger number: >
1974 :let java_minlines = 50
1975This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
1976displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
1977number is that redrawing can become slow.
1978
1979
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02001980JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
1981
1982The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
1983default. To disable concealment: >
1984 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
1985
1986To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
1987 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
1988
1989
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001990LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001991
1992Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
1993style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
1994define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
1995 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
1996
1997
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001998LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001999
2000Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
2001gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
2002 :syn sync minlines=300
2003may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2004difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2005
2006
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002007LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2008
2009To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2010
2011 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2012<
2013
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002014LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2015
2016The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2017
2018 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2019 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2020 Useful for AutoLisp.
2021 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2022 of parenthesization will receive different
2023 highlighting.
2024<
2025The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2026the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2027colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2028specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002029usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002030highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2031
2032
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002033LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002034
2035There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2036
2037If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2038
2039 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2040
2041For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2042set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2043
2044 :let lite_minlines = 200
2045
2046
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002047LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002048
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002049LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002050file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2051users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2052should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2053
2054 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2055
2056If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2057modeline. For a LPC file:
2058
2059 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2060
2061For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2062
2063 // vim:set ft=c:
2064
2065If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2066
2067There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002068used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002069and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002070assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002071you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2072
2073 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2074
2075For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2076
2077 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2078
2079For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2080
2081 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2082
2083For uLPC series of LPC:
2084uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2085instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2086
2087
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002088LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002089
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002090The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002091the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2092lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010020935.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002094
2095 :let lua_version = 5
2096 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002097
2098
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002099MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002100
2101Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002102quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002103signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2104whitespaces and end with a newline.
2105
2106Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002107as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002108only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2109
2110By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002111displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002112with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2113
2114 :let mail_minlines = 30
2115
2116
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002117MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002118
2119In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2120errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2121feature off by using: >
2122
2123 :let make_no_commands = 1
2124
2125
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002126MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002127
2128Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2129supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2130The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2131highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2132
2133 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2134
2135to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2136choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21371, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2138$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2139
2140 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2141 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2142 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2143 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2144 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2145 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2146 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2147 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2148 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2149
2150
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002151MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002152
2153Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2154have the following in your .vimrc: >
2155
2156 let filetype_m = "mma"
2157
2158
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002159MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002160
2161If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2162highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2163comments: >
2164
2165 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2166
2167To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2168
2169 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2170
2171To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2172'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2173
2174 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2175
2176Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2177
2178 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2179
2180To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2181
2182 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2183
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002184Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002185use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2186To enable this option: >
2187
2188 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2189
2190An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2191
2192 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2193
2194
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002195MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002196
2197There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2198
2199If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2200
2201 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2202
2203For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2204set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2205
2206 :let msql_minlines = 200
2207
2208
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002209N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2210
2211N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2212Couchbase Server databases.
2213
2214Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2215and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2216many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2217
2218
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002219NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002220
2221There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2222
2223If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2224errors, use this: >
2225
2226 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2227
2228If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2229
2230
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002231NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002232
2233The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2234activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2235can use them.
2236
2237For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002238processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002239features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: >
2240
2241 :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1
2242
2243Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2244Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2245there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002246you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002247can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2248native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2249\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2250accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2251environments.
2252
2253In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2254follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2255
22561. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2257
22582. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2259 exclamation mark, etc.
2260
22613. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2262 carriage return.
2263
2264The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2265algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2266
2267Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2268furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2269vertical space input will be output as is.
2270
2271Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2272than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2273practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002274marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002275need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002276spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2277
2278 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2279
2280Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2281with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2282highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002283"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002284
2285 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2286 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2287 \ gui=reverse,bold
2288
2289If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2290with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2291file: >
2292
2293 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2294
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002295As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002296paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2297
2298Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2299groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2300
2301
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002302OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002303
2304The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2305.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2306
2307 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2308
2309you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2310by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2311
2312 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2313
2314prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2315contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2316
2317
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002318PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002319
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002320The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002321and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002322as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2323sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002324you set the variable: >
2325
2326 :let papp_include_html=1
2327
2328in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2329sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002330edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002331
2332The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2333http://papp.plan9.de.
2334
2335
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002336PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002337
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002338Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal and those matching "*.pp"
2339could be Puppet or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you,
2340or you only edit Pascal files, use this in your startup vimrc: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002341
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002342 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2343 :let filetype_pp = "pascal"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002344
2345The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2346provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002347Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002348enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2349following line to your startup file: >
2350
2351 :let pascal_traditional=1
2352
2353To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2354keywords, etc): >
2355
2356 :let pascal_delphi=1
2357
2358
2359The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2360*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2361operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2362
2363 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2364
2365Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2366
2367 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2368
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002369Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002370pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2371match Turbo Pascal. >
2372
2373 :let pascal_gpc=1
2374
2375or >
2376
2377 :let pascal_fpc=1
2378
2379To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2380pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2381
2382 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2383
2384If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2385will be highlighted as Error. >
2386
2387 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2388
2389
2390
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002391PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002392
2393There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2394
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002395Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2396to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2397files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002398
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002399 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002400
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002401To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002402off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002403
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002404To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2405from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002406
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002407 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002408
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002409(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2410enabled it.)
2411
2412If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2413
2414 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2415
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002416(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002417
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002418The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2419highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002420perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2421
2422 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2423 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2424 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2425
2426(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2427
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002428The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002429synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2430If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002431then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002432out the line that causes the mistake.
2433
2434One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2435
2436 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2437 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2438
2439Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2440its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2441
2442 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2443
2444If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2445
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002446 :let perl_fold = 1
2447
2448If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2449
2450 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002451
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002452Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2453this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002454
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002455 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002456
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002457Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2458via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002459
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002460 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2461
2462Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2463behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2464
2465 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002466
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002467PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002468
2469[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2470it has been renamed to "php"]
2471
2472There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2473
2474If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2475
2476 let php_sql_query = 1
2477
2478For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2479
2480 let php_baselib = 1
2481
2482Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2483
2484 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2485
2486Using the old colorstyle: >
2487
2488 let php_oldStyle = 1
2489
2490Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2491
2492 let php_asp_tags = 1
2493
2494Disable short tags: >
2495
2496 let php_noShortTags = 1
2497
2498For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2499
2500 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2501
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002502For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002503one: >
2504
2505 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2506
2507Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2508
2509 let php_folding = 1
2510
2511Selecting syncing method: >
2512
2513 let php_sync_method = x
2514
2515x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2516x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2517x = 0 to sync from start.
2518
2519
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002520PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2521
2522TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2523variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002524see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002525
2526This syntax file has the option >
2527
2528 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2529
2530if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2531
2532
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002533PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002534
2535PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2536
2537This syntax file has the options:
2538
2539- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002540 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002541
2542 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002543 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002544
2545 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2546 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2547 continuation symbols
2548
2549 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2550
2551- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2552 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2553
2554
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002555PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002556
2557There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2558
2559If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2560
2561 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2562
2563For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2564set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2565
2566 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2567
2568
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002569POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002570
2571There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2572
2573First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2574currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2575and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2576Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2577extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2578level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2579highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2580
2581 :let postscr_level=2
2582
2583If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2584the most prevalent version currently.
2585
2586Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2587particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2588PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2589
2590If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2591Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2592follows: >
2593
2594 :let postscr_display=1
2595
2596If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2597Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2598postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2599
2600 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2601
2602PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2603useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2604cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2605character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2606explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2607highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2608
2609 :let postscr_fonts=1
2610 :let postscr_encodings=1
2611
2612There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2613PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2614operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2615if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2616operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2617or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2618highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2619postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2620
2621 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2622<
2623
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002624 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2625PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002626
2627This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2628
2629In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2630the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2631appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2632patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2633"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2634
2635For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2636files, add the following: >
2637
2638 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2639 \ set filetype=ptcap
2640
2641If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2642are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2643internal variable to a larger number: >
2644
2645 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2646
2647(The default is 20 lines.)
2648
2649
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002650PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651
2652Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2653doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2654startup vimrc: >
2655 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2656The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2657Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2658 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2659 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2660
2661
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002662PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002663
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002664There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002665
2666For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002667 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002668
2669For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002670 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002671
2672For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002673 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2674
2675For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2676 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2677or >
2678 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2679(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002680
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002681For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002682 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002683
2684If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002685preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002686 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2687
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002688Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002689 1 above with anything.
2690
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002691QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002692
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002693The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter)
2694based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit
2695between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax
2696definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users
2697to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can
2698be set for the following effects:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002699
2700set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2701 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2702
2703set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2704 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2705
2706set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2707 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2708
2709Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2710commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2711
2712
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002713R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2714
2715The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2716can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2717 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2718
2719You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2720 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2721
2722enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2723braces: >
2724 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2725
2726and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2727 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2728
2729
2730R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2731
2732To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2733 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2734
2735To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2736 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2737
2738To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2739 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2740
2741By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2742language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2743you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2744`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2745you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2746 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2747
2748
2749R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2750
2751To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2752 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2753
2754
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002755READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002756
2757The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002758few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002759items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2760command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2761 let readline_has_bash = 1
2762
2763This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2764later, and part earlier) adds.
2765
2766
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01002767REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax*
2768
2769Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy
2770language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with
2771the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego.
2772
2773
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002774RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2775
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002776Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2777select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2778syntax list.
2779
2780To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002781 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002782
2783To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2784`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2785 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002786 \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'],
2787 \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'],
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002788 ...
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002789 \ }
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002790
2791To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2792 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2793
2794To enable folding of sections: >
2795 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2796
2797Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2798
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002799
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002800REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002801
2802If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2803when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2804to a larger number: >
2805 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2806This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2807displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2808number is that redrawing can become slow.
2809
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002810Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2811comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2812your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2813>
2814 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2815
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002816
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002817RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002818
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002819 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2820 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2821 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2822 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2823 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2824
2825 *ruby_operators*
2826 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2827
2828Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2829
2830 :let ruby_operators = 1
2831<
2832 *ruby_space_errors*
2833 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2834
2835Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2836
2837 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2838<
2839This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2840as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2841"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2842spaces respectively.
2843
2844 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2845 Ruby: Folding ~
2846
2847Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2848
2849 :let ruby_fold = 1
2850<
2851This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2852buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2853filetypes.
2854
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002855Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2856"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2857
2858You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2859
2860 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2861<
2862The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2863
2864 keyword meaning ~
2865 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2866 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2867 NONE Nothing
2868 if "if" or "unless" block
2869 def "def" block
2870 class "class" block
2871 module "module" block
2872 do "do" block
2873 begin "begin" block
2874 case "case" block
2875 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2876 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2877 [ Array literal
2878 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2879 / Regexp
2880 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2881 : Symbol
2882 # Multiline comment
2883 << Here documents
2884 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2885
2886 *ruby_no_expensive*
2887 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002888
2889By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002890of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002891experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2892you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002893
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002894 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002895<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002896In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2897
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002898 *ruby_minlines*
2899
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002900If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2901scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2902the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002903
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002904 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002905<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002906Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2907largest class or module.
2908
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002909 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2910 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002911
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002912Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2913"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002914
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002915 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002916<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002917
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002918SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002919
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002920By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002921
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002922scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2923Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002924
2925
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002926SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002927
2928The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2929of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2930
2931The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2932case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002933used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002934highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2935 :let sdl_2000=1
2936
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002937This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002938keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2939 :let SDL_no_96=1
2940
2941
2942The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2943satisfied with it for my own projects.
2944
2945
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002946SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002947
2948To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2949highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2950
2951 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2952
2953in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2954inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2955by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2956also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2957you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2958
2959Bugs:
2960
2961 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2962 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2963 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2964 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2965 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2966 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2967
2968
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002969SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002970
2971The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2972
2973The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2974This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
2975closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
2976defined for you)
2977
2978Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
2979names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
2980
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002981Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002982names are colored differently than unknown ones.
2983
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002984Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002985are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
2986text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
2987<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
2988
2989If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
2990following syntax groups:
2991
2992 - sgmlBold
2993 - sgmlBoldItalic
2994 - sgmlUnderline
2995 - sgmlItalic
2996 - sgmlLink for links
2997
2998To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
2999following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
3000are read during initialization) >
3001 let sgml_my_rendering=1
3002
3003You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
3004vimrc file: >
3005 let sgml_no_rendering=1
3006
3007(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
3008
3009
Bram Moolenaar4466ad62020-11-21 13:16:30 +01003010 *ft-posix-syntax* *ft-dash-syntax*
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003011SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003012
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003013This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3014shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003015
3016Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003017various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003018
3019 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3020 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3021<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003022See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3023cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3024/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3025that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3026shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3027symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003028
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003029One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003030variables in your <.vimrc>:
3031
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003032 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003033 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01003034< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003035 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003036< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003037 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003038< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003039 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003040
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003041< (dash users should use posix)
3042
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003043If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3044default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003045the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3046statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003047sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003048
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003049The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3050
3051 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3052 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3053 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3054 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003055>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003056then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003057syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3058to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003059
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003060 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3061
3062If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3063when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003064to a larger number. Example: >
3065
3066 let sh_minlines = 500
3067
3068This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3069displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3070number is that redrawing can become slow.
3071
3072If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3073reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3074
3075 let sh_maxlines = 100
3076<
3077The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3078speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3079
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003080syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3081extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3082for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3083the following line in your .vimrc: >
3084
3085 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3086<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003087
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003088 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3089 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003090
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003091You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3092Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3093file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3094
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003095 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003096 " ==============
3097 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3098 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3099 unlet b:current_syntax
3100 endif
3101 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3102 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3103 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3104 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3105 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3106<
3107This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3108 awk '...awk code here...'
3109be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3110extended to other languages.
3111
3112
3113SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3114(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003115
3116The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3117
3118- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3119 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3120 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3121
3122- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3123 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003124 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003125 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3126 them in the syntax file.
3127
3128- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3129 highlighting of # style comments.
3130
3131 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3132 number of #s.
3133
3134 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003135 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003136
3137 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3138 more than one #.
3139
3140Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003141PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003142fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3143the syntax file.
3144
3145
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003146SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3147 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003148 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003149
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003150While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3151custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3152SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003153
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003154Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3155scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3156supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3157buffer by buffer basis.
3158
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003159For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003160
3161
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003162TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003163
3164This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3165for how the filetype is detected.
3166
3167Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003168is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003169this line to your .vimrc: >
3170
3171 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3172
3173If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3174when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3175to a larger number: >
3176
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003177 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003178
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003179This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3180displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3181synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3182tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3183redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003184
3185
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003186TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003187 *syntax-tex* *syntax-latex*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003188
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003189 Tex Contents~
3190 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3191 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3192 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3193 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3194 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3195 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3196 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3197 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3198 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3199 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3200 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3201 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3202 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003203 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003204 Tex: Match Check Control |tex-matchcheck|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003205
3206 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003207 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003208
3209As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3210sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3211 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3212in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3213modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3214 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003215If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003216 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003217<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003218 *g:tex_nospell*
3219 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3220
3221If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3222 let g:tex_nospell=1
3223into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3224comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3225
3226 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003227 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003228
3229Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3230prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3231this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3232 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003233If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3234see |g:tex_nospell|.
3235
3236 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003237 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003238
3239Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3240one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3241want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3242 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003243<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003244 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003245 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003246
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003247The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3248highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3249texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3250terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3251as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003252special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3253 %stopzone
3254which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3255texMathZone.
3256
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003257 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003258 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003259
3260If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3261 :syn sync maxlines=200
3262 :syn sync minlines=50
3263(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003264increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003265if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3266
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003267Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3268|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3269
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003270 *g:tex_fast*
3271
3272Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3273
3274 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3275
3276in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3277highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3278synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3279price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3280folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3281
3282You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3283selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3284
3285 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3286 c : allow texComment syntax
3287 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3288 M : allow texMath syntax
3289 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3290 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3291 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3292 S : allow texStyle syntax
3293 v : allow verbatim syntax
3294 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3295<
3296As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3297but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003298(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003299
3300 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003301 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003302
3303LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3304of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3305package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3306it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3307techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003308by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3309which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3310http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003311
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003312I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3313
3314 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3315<
3316The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3317
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003318 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003319 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003320
3321The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3322although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3323errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3324you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003325 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003326and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003327
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003328 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003329 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003330
3331If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3332code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003333 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3334You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3335(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3336As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3337 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3338You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3339and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3340The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3341has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003342
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003343 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003344 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003345
3346One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3347commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3348following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3349such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3350
3351 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3352 :set ft=tex
3353
3354Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3355always accept such use of @.
3356
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003357 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003358 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003359
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003360If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3361number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3362including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3363superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3364superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3365In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3366
3367One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3368with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003369
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003370 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003371 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3372
3373You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003374<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3375for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003376
3377 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003378 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003379 d = delimiters
3380 m = math symbols
3381 g = Greek
3382 s = superscripts/subscripts
3383<
3384By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3385substitution will not be made.
3386
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003387 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3388 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3389
3390Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3391keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3392syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3393
3394 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3395 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3396 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003397 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003398 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3399 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3400 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003401 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003402
3403 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3404 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3405
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003406 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3407 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3408
3409 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3410
3411 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3412 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3413
3414 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3415 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3416 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3417 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3418
3419 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3420 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3421<
3422 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3423 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3424 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3425< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3426 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3427
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003428 *tex-matchcheck* *g:tex_matchcheck*
3429 Tex: Match Check Control~
3430
3431 Sometimes one actually wants mismatched parentheses, square braces,
3432 and or curly braces; for example, \text{(1,10] is a range from but
3433 not including 1 to and including 10}. This wish, of course, conflicts
3434 with the desire to provide delimiter mismatch detection. To
3435 accommodate these conflicting goals, syntax/tex.vim provides >
3436 g:tex_matchcheck = '[({[]'
3437< which is shown along with its default setting. So, if one doesn't
3438 want [] and () to be checked for mismatches, try using >
3439 let g:tex_matchcheck= '[{}]'
3440< If you don't want matching to occur inside bold and italicized
3441 regions, >
3442 let g:tex_excludematcher= 1
3443< will prevent the texMatcher group from being included in those regions.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003444
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003445TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003446
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003447There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3448
3449For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3450set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3451
3452 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3453<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003454VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3455 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003456There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003457updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3458g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3459improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003460
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003461 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3462 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3463<
3464 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3465 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003466
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003467 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3468The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3469embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003470
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003471 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3472 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003473 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3474 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3475 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3476 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3477 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003478<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003479By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3480itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3481of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3482and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003483 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003484
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003485Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003486
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003487 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3488 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3489 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003490 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003491 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3492 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3493 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3494 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3495 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003496<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003497 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003498Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3499is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003500highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003501
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003502 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3503<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003504
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003505
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003506XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003507
3508The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3509variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3510You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3511xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3512your .vimrc. Example: >
3513 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3514When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3515
3516Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3517"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3518highlighted.
3519
3520
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003521XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003522
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003523Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003524setting a global variable: >
3525
3526 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3527<
3528 *xml-folding*
3529The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003530start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003531
3532 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3533 :set foldmethod=syntax
3534
3535Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3536especially for large files.
3537
3538
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003539X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003540
3541xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3542XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3543you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3544
3545To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3546somewhere else with "P".
3547
3548Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3549 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003550 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003551 : echo c
3552 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3553 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3554 :endfunction
3555 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3556 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3557This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3558It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3559must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3560
3561It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3562 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3563
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003564
3565YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3566
3567 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003568A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3569non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3570plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3571and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3572integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003573will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3574
3575Schema Description ~
3576failsafe No additional highlighting.
3577json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3578core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003579pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3580 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3581 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003582 schema.
3583
3584Default schema is `core`.
3585
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003586Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3587only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003588difference defined in the syntax file.
3589
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003590
3591ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3592
3593The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3594
3595 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3596
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003597==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010035986. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003599
3600Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3601
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036021. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003603 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3604 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3605 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3606 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3607 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3608
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036092. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003610 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3611
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036123. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003613 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3614 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3615 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3616
3617Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3618you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3619to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3620and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3621"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3622one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3623This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3624each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3625for a lot of groups.
3626
3627Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3628group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3629for the syntax group with the same name.
3630
3631In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3632defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3633using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3634match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3635keyword with ignoring case.
3636
3637
3638PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3639
3640When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3641
36421. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3643 defined last has priority.
36442. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36453. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3646 start in later positions.
3647
3648
3649DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3650
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003651:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003652 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3653 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3654 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3655 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3656
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003657:sy[ntax] case
3658 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003659
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003660
3661DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel*
3662
3663:sy[ntax] foldlevel [start | minimum]
3664 This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using
3665 foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|):
3666
3667 start: Use level of item containing start of line.
3668 minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line.
3669
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003670 The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003671 for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a
3672 higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items
3673 may close and open horizontally within a line.
3674
3675:sy[ntax] foldlevel
3676 Show either "syntax foldlevel start" or "syntax foldlevel minimum".
3677
3678 {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
3679
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003680SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3681
3682:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3683 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3684 in a syntax item:
3685
3686 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3687 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3688 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3689
3690 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3691 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3692 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3693
3694 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3695
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003696:sy[ntax] spell
3697 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3698 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3699
3700
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003701SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3702
3703:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3704 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3705 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3706
3707 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3708 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003709 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003710
3711 Example: >
3712 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3713<
3714 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3715 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3716 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3717
3718 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3719
3720 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003721 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003722 match.
3723
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003724 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3725 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003726 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003727
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003728DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3729
3730:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3731
3732 This defines a number of keywords.
3733
3734 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3735 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3736 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3737
3738 Example: >
3739 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3740<
3741 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3742 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3743 These examples do exactly the same: >
3744 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3745 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3746 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003747< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003748 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3749 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3750 variations at once: >
3751 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3752<
3753 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3754 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3755 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3756 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3757 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003758 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003759
3760 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3761 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3762 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3763
3764 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3765 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3766 instead.
3767
3768 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3769
3770 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3771 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3772 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003773 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003774 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3775 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3776< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3777 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3778 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3779
3780
3781DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3782
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003783:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3784 [excludenl]
3785 [keepend]
3786 {pattern}
3787 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003788
3789 This defines one match.
3790
3791 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3792 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3793 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3794 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3795 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003796 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3797 match with the end pattern. See
3798 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003799 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3800 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3801 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3802 line, which makes the match depend on where
3803 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3804 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3805
3806 Example (match a character constant): >
3807 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3808<
3809
3810DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3811 *E398* *E399*
3812:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3813 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3814 [keepend]
3815 [extend]
3816 [excludenl]
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003817 start={start-pattern} ..
3818 [skip={skip-pattern}]
3819 end={end-pattern} ..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003820 [{options}]
3821
3822 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3823
3824 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3825 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3826 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3827 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3828 for the text in between the matched start and
3829 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3830 a different group for the start or end match.
3831 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3832 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3833 match with the end pattern. See
3834 |:syn-keepend|.
3835 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003836 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003837 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3838 extend a containing match or item. Only
3839 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3840 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003841 start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003842 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003843 skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003844 the region where not to look for the end
3845 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003846 end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003847 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3848
3849 Example: >
3850 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3851<
3852 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3853 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3854 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3855 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3856 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3857 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3858
3859 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3860 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3861 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3862 the end patterns.
3863
3864 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3865 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3866 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3867
3868 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3869 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3870 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3871 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3872
3873 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3874 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3875 work: >
3876 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3877 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3878< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3879 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3880 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3881 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3882 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3883< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3884 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3885
3886 *:syn-keepend*
3887 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3888 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3889 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3890 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3891 { starts outer "{}" region
3892 { starts contained "{}" region
3893 } ends contained "{}" region
3894 } ends outer "{} region
3895 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3896 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3897 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3898 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3899 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3900 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3901 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3902< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3903 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3904
3905 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3906 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3907 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3908 contained matches.
3909 *:syn-extend*
3910 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3911 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3912 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3913 extended.
3914 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3915 others don't. Example: >
3916
3917 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3918 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3919 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3920
3921< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3922 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3923 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3924
3925 Another example: >
3926 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3927< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3928 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3929 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3930 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3931 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3932
3933 *:syn-excludenl*
3934 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3935 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3936 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3937 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3938 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3939 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3940 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3941 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3942 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3943 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3944 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3945 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3946 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3947
3948 *:syn-matchgroup*
3949 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3950 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3951 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3952< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3953 between with the "String" group.
3954 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3955 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3956 using a matchgroup.
3957
3958 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3959 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3960 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3961 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3962 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3963
3964 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3965 different colors: >
3966 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3967 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3968 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3969 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3970 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3971 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003972<
3973 *E849*
3974The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003975
3976==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010039777. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003978
3979The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
3980The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
3981and may be mixed with patterns.
3982
3983Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
3984can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02003985 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003986 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
3987:syntax keyword - - - - - -
3988:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
3989:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003990
3991These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003992 conceal
3993 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003994 contained
3995 containedin
3996 nextgroup
3997 transparent
3998 skipwhite
3999 skipnl
4000 skipempty
4001
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004002conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
4003
4004When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02004005Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02004006'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
4007concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
4008edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02004009Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004010
4011concealends *:syn-concealends*
4012
4013When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
4014the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
4015Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
4016'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
4017in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
4018
4019cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004020 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004021The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
4022when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
4023argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004024character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
4025a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004026 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02004027See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004028
4029contained *:syn-contained*
4030
4031When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
4032the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
4033another match. Example: >
4034 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
4035 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
4036
4037
4038display *:syn-display*
4039
4040If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
4041detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
4042by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
4043to be displayed.
4044
4045Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
4046conditions:
4047- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
4048 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
4049 line.
4050- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4051 make it continue on the next line.
4052- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4053 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4054 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4055- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4056 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4057 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4058 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4059
4060Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4061- match with a number
4062- match with a label
4063
4064
4065transparent *:syn-transparent*
4066
4067If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4068itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4069is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4070only to skip over a part of the text.
4071
4072The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4073unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4074avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4075highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4076 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4077 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4078 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4079 :hi link myString String
4080 :hi link myWord Comment
4081Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4082match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4083argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4084it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4085out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
4086"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This
4087happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4088position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4089
4090When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4091items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4092see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4093through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4094
4095 look from here
4096
4097 | | | | | |
4098 V V V V V V
4099
4100 xxxx yyy more contained items
4101 .................... contained item (transparent)
4102 ============================= first item
4103
4104The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4105transparent group.
4106
4107What you see is:
4108
4109 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4110
4111Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4112
4113
4114oneline *:syn-oneline*
4115
4116The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4117boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4118region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4119the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4120continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4121line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4122
4123When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4124pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4125end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4126means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4127be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4128line break.
4129
4130
4131fold *:syn-fold*
4132
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004133The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004134Example: >
4135 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4136 :syn sync fromstart
4137 :set foldmethod=syntax
4138This will make each {} block form one fold.
4139
4140The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4141ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4142The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02004143See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed
4144from its syntax items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004145{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4146
4147
4148 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004149contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004150
4151The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4152groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4153containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4154regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4155this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4156here.
4157
4158contains=ALL
4159 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4160 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4161
4162contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4163 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4164 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4165 are listed. Example: >
4166 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4167
4168contains=TOP
4169 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4170 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4171 argument.
4172contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4173 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4174
4175contains=CONTAINED
4176 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4177 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4178 argument.
4179contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4180 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4181 listed.
4182
4183
4184The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4185that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4186The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4187 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4188The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4189that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4190command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4191syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4192the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4193group names.
4194
4195The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4196region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4197|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4198region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4199area that is highlighted
4200
4201
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004202containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004203
4204The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4205item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4206containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4207
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004208The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004209
4210This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4211be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4212of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4213the C syntax: >
4214 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4215Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4216level.
4217
4218Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4219appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4220keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4221work.
4222
4223
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004224nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004225
4226The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4227separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4228
4229If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4230tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4231a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4232will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4233current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4234other groups. Example: >
4235 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4236 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4237 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4238
4239This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4240"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4241highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4242
4243 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4244 fff bbb fff bbb
4245
4246Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4247when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4248highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4249would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4250
4251
4252skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4253skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4254skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4255
4256These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4257used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004258 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004259 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4260 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4261
4262When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4263next group that matches the white space.
4264
4265When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4266line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4267line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4268the current item in the same line.
4269
4270When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4271groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4272for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4273space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4274
4275Example: >
4276 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4277 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4278 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4279Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4280match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4281precedence.
4282Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4283"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4284example).
4285
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004286IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4287
4288:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4289 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4290 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4291 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4292 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4293 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4294 given explicitly.
4295
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004296:sy[ntax] conceal
4297 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4298
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004299==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010043008. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004301
4302In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4303characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4304use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4305use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4306 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4307 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4308
4309See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004310always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004311value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4312not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4313independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4314
4315Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4316This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4317
4318 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4319The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4320change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4321match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4322are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4323pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4324
4325The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4326The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4327
4328ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4329me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4330hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4331he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4332rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4333re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4334lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4335
4336The {offset} can be:
4337
4338s start of the matched pattern
4339s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4340s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4341e end of the matched pattern
4342e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4343e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004344{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004345
4346Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4347
4348Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4349meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4350
4351 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4352match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4353region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4354region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4355region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4356
4357Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4358 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4359<
4360 some "string" text
4361 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4362
4363Notes:
4364- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4365 offset(s).
4366- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4367- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4368 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004369- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
Bram Moolenaar207f0092020-08-30 17:20:20 +02004370 This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004371 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004372- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4373 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4374 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4375
4376Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4377 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4378<
4379 /* this is a comment */
4380 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4381
4382A more complicated Example: >
4383 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4384<
4385 abcfoostringbarabc
4386 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004387 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004388
4389Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4390
4391Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4392with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4393in the pattern.
4394
4395The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4396be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4397cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4398characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4399used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4400specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4401
4402 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4403 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4404 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4405<
4406 ___zzzz ___wwww
4407 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4408 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4409 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4410
4411The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4412unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4413
4414
4415Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4416
4417The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4418expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4419
4420When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4421allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004422following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4423the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004424
4425The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4426continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4427matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4428halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4429previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4430is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4431 x x a
4432 b x x
4433Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4434after the "\n".
4435
4436
4437External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4438
4439These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4440
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004441 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004442 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4443 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4444 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004445
4446 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4447 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4448 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4449 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4450
4451Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4452sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4453shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4454items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4455referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4456example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4457 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4458
4459As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4460it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004461changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004462first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4463also be used in skip patterns: >
4464 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4465
4466Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4467indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4468to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4469Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4470within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4471sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4472the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4473
4474Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4475cannot be referred to.
4476
4477==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010044789. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004479
4480:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4481 [add={group-name}..]
4482 [remove={group-name}..]
4483
4484This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4485single name.
4486
4487 contains={group-name}..
4488 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4489 add={group-name}..
4490 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4491 remove={group-name}..
4492 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4493
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004494A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4495nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4496this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004497
4498Example: >
4499 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4500 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4501
4502As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4503retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4504to speak: >
4505 :syntax keyword A aaa
4506 :syntax keyword B bbb
4507 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4508 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4509 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4510
4511This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4512 :syntax keyword A aaa
4513 :syntax keyword B bbb
4514 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4515 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4516 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4517 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4518 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004519<
4520 *E848*
4521The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004522
4523==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100452410. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004525
4526It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4527a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4528two different ways:
4529
4530 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4531 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4532 the |:runtime| command: >
4533
4534 " In cpp.vim:
4535 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4536 :unlet b:current_syntax
4537
4538< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4539 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4540 ":syntax include" command:
4541
4542:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4543
4544 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4545 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4546 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4547 that list. >
4548
4549 " In perl.vim:
4550 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4551 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4552<
4553 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4554 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4555 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4556 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4557 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +01004558 with their own version, without replacing the file that does the
4559 ":syn include".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004560
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004561 *E847*
4562The maximum number of includes is 999.
4563
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004564==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100456511. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004566
4567Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4568make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4569redrawing starts.
4570
4571:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4572
4573There are four ways to synchronize:
45741. Always parse from the start of the file.
4575 |:syn-sync-first|
45762. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4577 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4578 |:syn-sync-second|
45793. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4580 |:syn-sync-third|
45814. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4582 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4583
4584 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4585For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4586limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4587
4588If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4589that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4590lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4591
4592If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4593for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4594adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4595slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004596 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004597<
4598 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4599When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4600cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4601start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4602the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4603break use this: >
4604 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4605The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4606change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4607value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4608
4609
4610First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4611>
4612 :syntax sync fromstart
4613
4614The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4615accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4616so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004617when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004618case: to the end of the file).
4619
4620Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4621
4622
4623Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4624
4625For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4626Example: >
4627 :syntax sync ccomment
4628
4629When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4630comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4631used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4632An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4633 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4634This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4635used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4636region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4637
4638The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4639lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4640lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4641lines, but it hard to sync on).
4642
4643Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4644that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4645is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4646chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4647is hardly ever noticed.
4648
4649
4650Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4651
4652For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4653Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4654means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4655Example: >
4656 :syntax sync minlines=50
4657
4658"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4659
4660
4661Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4662
4663The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4664sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4665region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4666starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4667the search continues backwards in the file.
4668
4669This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4670matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4671- Keywords cannot be used.
4672- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4673 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4674- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4675 forwards.
4676- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4677 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4678 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01004679 consecutive lines that contain the continuation pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004680- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4681 group of continued lines).
4682- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4683 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4684 line (or group of continued lines).
4685- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4686 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4687 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4688 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4689
4690There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
46911. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4692 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4693 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4694 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
46952. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4696 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4697 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4698 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4699Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4700
4701Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4702avoid finding unwanted matches.
4703
4704[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4705search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4706highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4707faster.]
4708
4709 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4710 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4711
4712 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4713 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4714 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4715 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4716 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4717
4718 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4719 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4720
4721 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4722 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4723 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4724 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4725 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4726 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4727 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4728 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4729 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4730 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4731
4732 :syntax sync match ..
4733 :syntax sync region ..
4734
4735 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4736 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4737
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004738 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004739 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4740
4741 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4742 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4743 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4744
4745If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4746searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4747few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4748 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4749
4750You can clear all sync settings with: >
4751 :syntax sync clear
4752
4753You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4754 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4755
4756==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100475712. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004758
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004759This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004760
4761 :sy[ntax] [list]
4762
4763To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4764
4765 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4766
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004767To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004768
4769 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4770
4771See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4772
4773Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4774is mostly used, because it looks better.
4775
4776==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100477713. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004778
4779There are three types of highlight groups:
4780- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4781 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4782 linked to a group of the second type.
4783- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4784- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4785 *hitest.vim*
4786You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4787 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4788This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4789in their own color.
4790
4791 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004792:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4793 This is basically the same as >
4794 :echo g:colors_name
4795< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4796 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4797 feature it will output "unknown".
4798
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004799:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004800 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004801 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004802 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4803 "start" and then under "opt".
4804
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004805 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004806 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004807
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004808 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004809 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004810 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004811 runtime colors/evening.vim
4812 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4813
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004814< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4815 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4816 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004817 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004818 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004819 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004820
4821:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4822 attributes set.
4823
4824:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4825 List one highlight group.
4826
4827:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4828 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4829 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4830 default colors to use.
Bram Moolenaar213da552020-09-17 19:59:26 +02004831 If there was a default link, restore it. |:hi-link|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004832
4833:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4834:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4835 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4836 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4837
4838:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4839 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4840 an existing group.
4841 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4842 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4843 argument.
4844
4845Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4846default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4847highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4848values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4849the default value.
4850
4851A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4852a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4853
4854 :hi Comment gui=bold
4855
4856Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4857specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4858result is like this single command has been used: >
4859 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4860<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004861 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004862When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4863also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4864 :verbose hi Comment
4865< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004866 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004867
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004868When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4869mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004870
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004871 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4872There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4873term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004874cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004875 termcap entry)
4876gui the GUI
4877
4878For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4879the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4880
48811. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4882
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004883 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4884 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004885 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004886term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4887 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4888 following items (in any order):
4889 bold
4890 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004891 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004892 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004893 reverse
4894 inverse same as reverse
4895 italic
4896 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004897 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004898 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4899
4900 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4901 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004902 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004903 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
Bram Moolenaaracc22402020-06-07 21:07:18 +02004904 are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set
4905 with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these
4906 termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: >
4907 let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m"
4908 let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m"
4909
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004910
4911start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4912stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4913 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4914 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4915
4916 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4917 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4918 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4919 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4920 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4921 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4922 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4923
4924 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4925
4926 1. A string with escape sequences.
4927 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4928 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4929 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4930 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4931
4932 2. A list of terminal codes.
4933 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4934 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4935 White space is not allowed. Example:
4936 start=t_C1,t_BL
4937 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4938
4939
49402. highlight arguments for color terminals
4941
4942cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4943 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4944 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4945 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4946 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004947 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4948 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4949 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004950
4951ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4952ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02004953ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul*
4954 These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and
4955 underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal.
4956
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004957 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4958 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4959 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4960 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4961 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4962 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4963
4964 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4965 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4966 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4967 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4968 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
4969
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004970 The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so
4971 these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in
4972 X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004973 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
4974 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
4975
4976 *cterm-colors*
4977 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
4978 0 0 Black
4979 1 4 DarkBlue
4980 2 2 DarkGreen
4981 3 6 DarkCyan
4982 4 1 DarkRed
4983 5 5 DarkMagenta
4984 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
4985 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
4986 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
4987 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
4988 10 2* Green, LightGreen
4989 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
4990 12 1* Red, LightRed
4991 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
4992 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
4993 15 7* White
4994
4995 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
4996 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
4997 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
4998 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
4999 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
5000 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
5001 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
5002 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
5003 a number instead of a color name.
5004
5005 The case of the color names is ignored.
5006 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005007 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005008 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
5009
5010 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
5011 colors!
5012
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01005013 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
5014
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005015 *:hi-normal-cterm*
5016 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
5017 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
5018 Example: >
5019 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
5020< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02005021 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
5022 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
5023 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
5024 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
5025 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02005026 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005027 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01005028 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005029
5030 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
5031 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
5032 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
5033 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02005034 *E419* *E420* *E453*
5035 When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors,
5036 "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after
5037 setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows
5038 console. Example, for reverse video: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005039 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
5040< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
Bram Moolenaar75e15672020-06-28 13:10:22 +02005041 command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005042 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
5043
5044
50453. highlight arguments for the GUI
5046
5047gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
5048 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
5049 See |attr-list| for a description.
5050 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
5051 have the same effect.
5052 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
5053
5054font={font-name} *highlight-font*
5055 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
5056 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
5057 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
5058<
5059 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
5060 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
5061 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5062 used).
5063 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5064 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5065 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5066 changed.
5067 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5068 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5069 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005070 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5071 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5072 Example: >
5073 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005074
5075guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5076guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005077guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5078 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005079 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5080 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005081 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005082 NONE no color (transparent)
5083 bg use normal background color
5084 background use normal background color
5085 fg use normal foreground color
5086 foreground use normal foreground color
5087 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5088 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5089 Example: >
5090 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5091<
5092 *gui-colors*
5093 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5094 Red LightRed DarkRed
5095 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5096 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5097 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5098 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5099 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5100 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5101 Black White
5102 Orange Purple Violet
5103
5104 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5105 |win32-colors|.
5106
5107 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5108 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5109 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005110 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005111 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005112 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
5113 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
5114<
5115 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5116These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5117'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5118of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5119command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005120 *hl-ColorColumn*
5121ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005122 *hl-Conceal*
5123Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5124 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005125 *hl-Cursor*
5126Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005127lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5128 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005129 *hl-CursorIM*
5130CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005131 *hl-CursorColumn*
5132CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5133 set
5134 *hl-CursorLine*
5135CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5136 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005137 *hl-Directory*
5138Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5139 *hl-DiffAdd*
5140DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5141 *hl-DiffChange*
5142DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5143 *hl-DiffDelete*
5144DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5145 *hl-DiffText*
5146DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005147 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005148EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5149 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005150 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5151ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5152 *hl-VertSplit*
5153VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5154 *hl-Folded*
5155Folded line used for closed folds
5156 *hl-FoldColumn*
5157FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5158 *hl-SignColumn*
5159SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5160 *hl-IncSearch*
5161IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5162 ":s///c"
5163 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005164LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005165 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005166 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5167LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5168 option is set, above the cursor line.
5169 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5170LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5171 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005172 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar410e98a2019-09-09 22:05:49 +02005173CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' is
5174 set to "number" or "both", or 'relativenumber' is set, for
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01005175 the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005176 *hl-MatchParen*
5177MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5178 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5179
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005180 *hl-ModeMsg*
5181ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5182 *hl-MoreMsg*
5183MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5184 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005185NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5186 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5187 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5188 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005189 *hl-Normal*
5190Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005191 *hl-Pmenu*
5192Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5193 *hl-PmenuSel*
5194PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5195 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5196PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5197 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5198PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005199 *hl-Question*
5200Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005201 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5202QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005203 *hl-Search*
5204Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005205 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005206 *hl-SpecialKey*
5207SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5208 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5209 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5210 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005211 *hl-SpellBad*
5212SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5213 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005214 *hl-SpellCap*
5215SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5216 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005217 *hl-SpellLocal*
5218SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5219 used in another region. |spell|
5220 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5221 *hl-SpellRare*
5222SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5223 hardly ever used. |spell|
5224 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005225 *hl-StatusLine*
5226StatusLine status line of current window
5227 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5228StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5229 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5230 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005231 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5232StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5233 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5234StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5235 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005236 *hl-TabLine*
5237TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5238 *hl-TabLineFill*
5239TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5240 *hl-TabLineSel*
5241TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005242 *hl-Terminal*
5243Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005244 *hl-Title*
5245Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5246 *hl-Visual*
5247Visual Visual mode selection
5248 *hl-VisualNOS*
5249VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5250 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5251 *hl-WarningMsg*
5252WarningMsg warning messages
5253 *hl-WildMenu*
5254WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5255
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005256 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005257The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005258statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005259
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005260For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005261scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5262Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5263and guifg.
5264
5265 *hl-Menu*
5266Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5267 Also used for the toolbar.
5268 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5269
5270 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5271 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5272 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5273 set.
5274
5275 *hl-Scrollbar*
5276Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5277 scrollbars.
5278 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5279
5280 *hl-Tooltip*
5281Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5282 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5283
5284 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5285 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5286 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5287 set.
5288
5289==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100529014. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005291
5292When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5293can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5294group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5295
5296To set a link:
5297
5298 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5299
5300To remove a link:
5301
5302 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5303
5304Notes: *E414*
5305- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5306 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5307- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5308 removed.
5309- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5310 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5311 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5312 links for groups that already have settings.
5313
5314 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5315The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5316group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5317will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5318
5319Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5320specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5321 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5322If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5323 :highlight link cComment Question
5324Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5325overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5326
Bram Moolenaar23515b42020-11-29 14:36:24 +01005327To have a link survive `:highlight clear`, which is useful if you have
5328highlighting for a specific filetype and you want to keep it when selecting
5329another color scheme, put a command like this in the
5330"after/syntax/{filetype}.vim" file: >
5331 highlight! default link cComment Question
5332
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005333==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100533415. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005335
5336If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5337command: >
5338 :syntax clear
5339
5340This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5341or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5342in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5343load the syntax file.
5344The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5345loaded after this command.
5346
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005347To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5348 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5349This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5350
5351To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5352 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5353This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5354
5355 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005356If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5357the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5358 :syntax off
5359
5360What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5361 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5362See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5363$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5364
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005365 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5366If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5367defaults back: >
5368
5369 :syntax reset
5370
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005371It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5372affects the highlighting.
5373
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005374This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5375
5376Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5377back to their Vim default.
5378Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5379scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5380
5381What this actually does is: >
5382
5383 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5384 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5385
5386Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5387
5388 *syncolor*
5389If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5390script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5391'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5392the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5393reset" command.
5394
5395For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5396
5397 if &background == "light"
5398 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5399 else
5400 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5401 endif
5402
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005403 *E679*
5404Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5405'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5406endless loop.
5407
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005408Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5409your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5410depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5411
5412 *syntax_cmd*
5413The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5414syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5415 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5416 links are kept
5417 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5418 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5419 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5420 the colors.
5421 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5422 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5423 them.
5424
5425==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100542616. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005427
5428If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5429mappings.
5430
5431 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5432 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5433>
5434 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5435 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5436
5437WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5438memory Vim will consume.
5439
5440Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5441must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5442
5443Put these lines in your Makefile:
5444
5445# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5446types: types.vim
5447types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005448 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005449 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5450 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5451
5452And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5453
5454 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5455 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5456 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5457 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5458 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5459
5460==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100546117. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005462
5463Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5464possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5465private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5466with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5467highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5468italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5469
5470To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5471windows on the buffer: >
5472 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005473< *w:current_syntax*
5474This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5475"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5476restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5477"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5478"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005479Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005480
5481Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005482on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005483syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005484same buffer.
5485
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005486A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5487is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5488When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005489
5490==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100549118. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005492
5493Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5494default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5495 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5496 : if has("terminfo")
5497 : set t_Co=8
5498 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5499 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5500 : else
5501 : set t_Co=8
5502 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5503 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5504 : endif
5505 :endif
5506< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5507
5508You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5509e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5510
5511Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5512be wrong.
5513 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5514The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5515But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5516 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5517 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5518<
5519 *colortest.vim*
5520To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005521To use it, execute this command: >
5522 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005523
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005524Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005525output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5526at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5527colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5528
5529 *xfree-xterm*
5530To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005531included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005532at: >
5533 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5534Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5535termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5536supports. >
5537 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5538If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5539(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5540
5541This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5542 :if has("terminfo")
5543 : set t_Co=16
5544 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5545 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5546 :else
5547 : set t_Co=16
5548 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5549 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5550 :endif
5551< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5552
5553Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5554translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5555Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5556
5557For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5558
5559 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5560 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5561
5562Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5563and try if that works.
5564
5565You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5566 XTerm*color0: #000000
5567 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5568 XTerm*color2: #008000
5569 XTerm*color3: #808000
5570 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5571 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5572 XTerm*color6: #008080
5573 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5574 XTerm*color8: #808080
5575 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5576 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5577 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5578 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5579 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5580 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5581 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5582 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5583
5584[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5585cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005586newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005587
5588To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5589Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5590 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5591<
5592 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5593To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5594Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5595these resources:
5596 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5597 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5598 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5599 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5600
5601 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005602These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005603foreground colors: >
5604 :if has("terminfo")
5605 : set t_Co=8
5606 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5607 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5608 :else
5609 : set t_Co=8
5610 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5611 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5612 :endif
5613< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5614
5615 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5616These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5617emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5618bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5619 :set t_Co=16
5620 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5621 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5622<
5623 *TTpro-telnet*
5624These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5625open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5626 set t_Co=16
5627 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5628 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5629Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5630that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5631(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5632
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005633
5634==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100563519. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005636
5637This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5638
5639If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5640faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5641as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5642
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005643Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5644You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5645
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005646To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5647sequence: >
5648 :syntime on
5649 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5650 :syntime report
5651
5652This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5653it took to match them against the text.
5654
5655:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5656 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5657 matching.
5658
5659:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5660
5661:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5662
5663:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5664 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5665 the output.
5666
5667 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5668 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5669 matching this pattern.
5670 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5671 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5672 matched
5673 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5674 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5675 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5676 this is not unique.
5677 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5678
5679Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5680include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5681pattern does NOT match.
5682
5683When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5684all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5685literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5686
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005687"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005688 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005689"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005690
5691
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005692 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: